Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. such as duct. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. fixtures. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. electrical panels.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. and piping. and plumbing engineering workflows. Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements. and plumbing fixtures. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. 3 . NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials.

you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. and sheets to document the project. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Create schedules. templates. views. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. When you open a training file. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. annotations. to provide a richer and more finished design. You do not design entire systems. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. is located and accessed in the training files location. On the Contents tab. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. However. you learn where the training files are located. when you add ductwork. such as templates and families. you can choose to save your work. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. In this exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Metric: files for users working with metric units. however. your Training folder may be in a different location. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Contact your CAD manager for more information. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. and tags. Create detail views. For example. as well as how to open and save them. So. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. NOTE Depending on your installation. For example. After completing each exercise.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training.

you are prompted to save the changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. enter the new file name. and click Save. For Files of type. verify that Project Files (*. the Open dialog displays. You may close the file with or without saving changes. if you open settings. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. a list of file types displays. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 3 In the right pane. and you can open any supported file type. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For File name.rvt.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. 4 Click the training file name. scroll down.rvt) is selected. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Imperial or Metric. For example. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Open. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 8 If you have made changes.rvt and make changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. and click the Training Files icon. click ➤ Save As.

6 .

every drawing sheet. drawings. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. and plans. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In this case. If the length of the elevation is changed. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and schedules required for a building project. If you move the partition. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. As you work in drawing and schedule views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the hierarchy of elements. ■ ■ 7 . 2D and 3D view. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the operation of the software is parametric. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. schedules. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In the Revit MEP model. and phases when you need it. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the floor or roof remains connected. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. scope. drawing sheets. quantities. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the parameter is one of association or connection. hence. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. You learn the terminology. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. sections.

■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They display in relevant views of the design. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and electrical panels. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. tags. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sprinklers. For example. dimensions. filled regions. sinks. grids. sinks. boilers. tags. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sprinklers. ducts. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. levels. Examples include detail lines. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and electrical panels. boilers. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. They help to describe or document the design. dimensions. and reference planes are datum elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and 2D detail components. When you change something. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ducts.

This information includes components used to design the model. To place levels. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. section views. Most often. In Revit MEP. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. For example. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. and types. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. they are implied by what you do and how you draw.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. for example. In other cases. By using a single project file. and so forth). Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. North . and drawings of the design. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. first floor. from geometry to construction data. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. However. schedules. you can explicitly control them. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. elevation views. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you must be in a section or elevation view. or bottom of foundation. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. views of the project. programming is not required. The project file contains all information for the building design. If you can draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Often. top of wall. floors. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. such as roofs. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. and ceilings. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. families. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.

showing. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. With a few clicks. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. each in-place family contains only a single type. Then experiment with them. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. System families include ducts. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. such as a 30” X 42” title block. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Type: Each family can have several types. pipes. identical use. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. System families can be transferred between projects. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. hiding. or layer the views to see only the one on top. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. A type can be a specific size of a family. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. You can also display several project views at one time. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. and wires. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. However. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. and similar graphical representation. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Unlike system and standard component families. A type can also be a style. For example.

click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To return the panel to the ribbon.

. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. data and systems. select the tool first. When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and for switching views. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and CAD files.. project and system parameters. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. then select what you want to modify. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and settings.

when adding duct. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). displays frequently used tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . By default. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. To keep a panel expanded. For example.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector.

.. select a template and create a new drawing. (Export) On the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. click. (Open) save the current drawing. select a file to open..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.

family. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . but is not enabled by default. or template file. publish the current project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. click.. (Licensing) close the file. (Publish) print the current drawing.. provides views including Default 3D. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Print) access product and license information. To enable or disable a tool item... Camera. annotation. to. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. and Walkthrough. annotation. family. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project.On the application menu.

In addition. To show the Status Bar again. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Modify. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. This displays the command history in a list. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Starting with the most recent command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Clipboard. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. or the Family Editor. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons.To undo or redo a series of operations. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. displaying the same information. However. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. To hide the Status Bar. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. When you are using a command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. workshared components. When you are highlighting an element or component. when you switch to another editing mode. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Group. check the Status Bar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. repeat the command.

It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. select one or more elements of the same category. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. When you place an element in a drawing.To cancel or exit the current command. To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . On the Quick Access toolbar. for example. Place a Wall. click (Modify). Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon.

you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. click Training Files. In the following steps. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. 1 Click ➤ Open.

6 Click in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Modifying the View | 19 . this is referred to as a crossing selection. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms in on the selected area. To modify or add snap increments. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. In the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click . on the Navigation bar.

11 Click and hold the mouse button. ➤ Options. press ESC. and click tin the Options dialog. moving the wheel to the desired location. 14 To exit the wheel. As you move the mouse. click the SteeringWheels tab. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. For more information about SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Click and drag to orbit the design. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. To define settings for SteeringWheels.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. and then using the Zoom tool again. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.

referred to as shape handles.Design. and select the duct. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Similar controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. display along the ends. After you are familiar with these tasks. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. bottoms.HVAC Plan . 2 Enter ZR. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Small blue dots. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. These are the drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. called drag controls. as shown.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and open Level 2 .

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 6 On the Undo menu. In this example. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. Move. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. The duct is moved to the new position. Some commands. and drag it to the left as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click to specify the starting position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. you want to move the duct. After selecting the element to move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. for example. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . as shown.

you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Press ESC twice. Select Mechanical . For example. 14 Enter VG.End a command Some commands. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Return. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 To end a command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Click OK.Supply. such as the Modify Ducts command.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

use copy/monitor. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. In that case. 5 In the New Project dialog. settings. 27 . Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. Finally. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 6 Click OK. you learn how to start a project from a template. such as the default project units and settings. such as ducts and pipes. the default building levels and standard views. create and manage views. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. select Project. link files. under Template file. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. system families. under Create new. You can either select a template from the template library. click Browse. such as coordination review and interference checking. You also learn how to use collaboration tools.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. New projects inherit all the families. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and modify system settings. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.rte template. and click Open. and loadable families. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. and geometry from the starting template. You can choose from several templates. click Training files.

TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. For Location. click Edit. ■ ■ Under Create new. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select Level 1. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. under Energy Analysis. you can select it now. review the construction materials listed. select Manchester. When you select the material. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. In the Choose Template dialog. 10 Using the same method. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. create another new project using the Construction template. If you want to use a template other than the default. (Browse). 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.rte template and click Open. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Project template. click (Browse). navigate to Imperial Templates. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. for City. 8 In the drawing area. select School or University. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify.7 In the Project Browser. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK twice. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. for Energy Data. and open North. For example. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click Browse. NH. ■ For Building Construction. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Click Cancel. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.

10 1/2". 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and demand factors for electrical systems. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Identity Data. Click OK twice. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 33 Click OK. power distribution systems. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. plumbing. 27 Click OK. After standard settings have been established for an organization. click Sizes. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 24 In the right pane. 26 In the right pane. for 3 1/2". 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and 12 1/2". For Categories. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . click Rectangular.rfa and click Open. piping. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 4 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. wiring.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. 22 In the right pane. Holding CTRL. and 5 1/2". 4 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. under Duct Settings. click Round. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 23 In the left pane. and fire protection systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. under Pipe Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for 3/4". 11 1/2". select Views. for 3 1/2". click Wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 5 1/2".

Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Family and Type. select Sub-Discipline. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Browse. select Auto . you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. families. In addition. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. You need to create the MEP model for the project.Origin to Origin. Linking Projects In this exercise. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Then by. click Training. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. For Then by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Sort by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. To enable this coordination. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. sheets. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Project. and groups that are contained in a project. 4 In the New Project dialog. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. under Create new. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Click Open.rvt. 38 Close the file. 5 Click OK. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. under Template file. From the Positioning list. select Associated Level. select View Name.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

click the My Library icon. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. or families. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.11 In the Places dialog. and change the name to My Library. Save. 15 Under Library Name. and Import dialogs. ➤ Open. and click (Browse). 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click OK twice. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Load. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click My Library. click (Add Value). templates. and select it as the library path. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and click Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.

click OK. 21 On the File Locations tab. custom color files. 20 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. 19 Click Cancel. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Places. 27 Click OK. (Remove Value) to delete the library. select Ignore words in uppercase. This path is determined during installation. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 5 In the text editor. 12 Create a new project using the default template. If you work in a large office. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click the Spelling tab. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. If you want to relocate this path. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. view the current path. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 9 In the text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 3 Under Settings. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Edit. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 22 Select My Library. and decal image files. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 11 In the Options dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. such as bump maps. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location.

18 Click ➤ Options. 23 In the text editor. you modify snap increments.. click the Spelling tab. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. delete sheetmtl-CU. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . work with snapping turned off. In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.rte. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 20 Under Settings. under Template file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 22 In the text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. under Dimension Snaps. 19 In the Options dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. 24 In the Options dialog. click OK. you modify snap settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 In the New Project dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Training Files. click Close. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 6 In the Snaps dialog. and enter 1 . As you zoom in and out within a view. click OK. click Restore Defaults. 25 Close the file without saving it. 21 Under Personal dictionary.17 In the Spelling dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Edit. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. use the wheel button on your mouse. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.7 Under Object Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. While sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This is the increment that you added previously. such as ZO to zoom out. zoom out until it does so. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. For example. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . TIP To zoom while sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. deselect Chain. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. click OK.

19 Enter SM. and the wall edges. and specify the wall endpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file. with or without saving it. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Make sure you also delete the semicolon. it will snap to the endpoints. 25 Click OK. 22 Move the cursor downward. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and delete the value 1’ .14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and move the cursor to the right.. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

you can choose to save your work. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you first configure the linked architectural model. 45 . However. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you first plan the system. As you create the mechanical system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. By following the recommended workflow. After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. water source heat pump (WSHP). You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. methodology. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This system consists of a cooling tower.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. After applying a color scheme to the zones.autodesk. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. At the end of the tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In this lesson. you will understand the process. and then you create a plenum level. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. go to http://www.

4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select Room Bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file. under Constraints. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. ceilings. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 1 In the Project Browser. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i.rvt. roof. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. you add a level for plenums. click Training Files. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. In this section. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. not in the MEP training file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click to select it. Next. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.

The new level is placed. and double-click West . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.MEP. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click Plan View Types. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and enter Level 2 Plenum. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and click OK. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Preparing Spaces | 47 . 16 Press Esc. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 9 On the Draw panel. enter 8'. For Offset.6 In the Project Browser.

Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. enter 0. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE After finishing each exercise. For Sub-Discipline. Under Identity Data. for View Scale. enter an Offset of 1' 0". for Level. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. select Design. In the next exercise. select MEP . ■ Click OK twice. you can choose to save your work. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . and click Properties. for View Range. For Cut plane. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under Extents. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. for Default View Template. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you place spaces in areas of the building model. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Under View Depth. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and for Offset. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. 20 In the Project Browser.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. click Edit. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. select Plenum Plan. and then place spaces in various types of areas. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Top. In this exercise. select Level Above (Level 3). For View Classification. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum. However. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.

walls. select Horizontal. For Space. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Offset. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select New. For Upper Limit. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. enter 0. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and ceilings). indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. Placing Spaces | 49 . click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For (Tag Location). select Level 2 Plenum. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Click OK. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . For Name. enter 219. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. 9 Select the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter Library. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 14 In the drawing area. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.7 Click to place the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ensuring coordination between the files. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

20 Click in the Library to place the space. Placing Spaces | 51 .15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. For Offset. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 21 Using the method learned previously. select Level 3. and then click Modify. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Upper Limit.

24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. 23 Click OK. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. under Energy Analysis.

enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted. for Upper Limit.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and for Offset. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and scroll to the newly placed space. 10 Using the same method. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. change the space number to 216A. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. as shown. In the schedule. and press Enter. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. enter Corridor. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . which was numbered 219Q. double-click the space name. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the floor plan. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Close the schedule view.7 In the Project Browser.

15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. you place a space in a chase. click Training Files. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If necessary. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view.

7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. right-click. and then click OK. enter Chase. Under Identity Data. for Upper Limit. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Interior and Reference. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. expand Spaces. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click in the chase area to place the space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. for Name. select Level 3. enter 0. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. On the Options Bar. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Upper Limit.4 Press Esc. 12 Click in the section view. select the space. In the plan view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 6 Enter VG. For Number. and click Element Properties. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Roof Level. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 10 In the plan view. For Limit Offset. enter 225PC. For Offset. enter 4'.

58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. All spaces in the view are tagged. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click OK. ceilings.Space Plan. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 17 Type ZF. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. In the next exercises. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. floors. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. select Space Tag With Volume. 15 Press Esc. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Bounding elements (such as walls. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and maximize the view. under Loaded Tags.

verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click View ➤ Zones. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . indicating that it’s the active view. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. which removes the space from the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). After a space is placed in an area. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. it is automatically added to the Default zone.rvt. To display space reference lines. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Zoning is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference. under Spaces.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. In this exercise. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.

Next. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view. and modify the zone properties. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. As you do this. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Instruction 221. under Energy Analysis. Using the Edit Zone tab. double-click 121 Cafeteria. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and a new zone is created. the Edit Zone tab displays. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. click Reference.Zoning is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. and Electrical 220 spaces. select Computer Lab 222. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The Zone tool is active. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 In the drawing area. and click Finish Editing Zone.5 In the System Browser. select Occupiable. under Spaces. and click OK. The graphic in the System Browser updates. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assign spaces to zones in the building.rvt. you assign spaces to a zone. click Training Files. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that the space is occupiable.

and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 5 With the drawing area active. Instruction. Click OK. To view the zone in the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Expand HVAC Zones. type VG. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.In the System Browser. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . select HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility.

Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 9 In the System Browser. In this exercise. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. expand 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. and click OK. and verify the zone in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. under Spaces. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. under Identity Data. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Area B. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2 . To display space reference lines. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Reference. 11 Close the System Browser.West . click Training Files. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.West . click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning. for Name.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).

click in the Level 2 . 15 Press Esc. zoom out. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Select Attached End. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view to activate it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Verify that the distance is 1/2".5 Click in the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning view.Zoning floor plan.

The new zone name displays in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. double-click Level 1 . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. on the ViewCube. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. click the corner where the Top. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Front. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. double-click the zone tag.rvt. click Training Files. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify the building.Zoning view. enter Lounge . for Name Value.East. and click OK. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and zone information. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.Zoning to make it the active view. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.

Click (Highlight). click (Isolate). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you isolate the space. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Using the Highlight tool. and select 109 Lounge. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. With 109 Lounge selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected. Next. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them.

■ On the Details tab. click . This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. For People. select 1_South_Lounge. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and in the People dialog. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. select 109 Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. Below the list of spaces and zones. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and click OK. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. the space information displays for the selected space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Construction Type. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. click . and then click OK. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. click . Next. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Electrical Loads. scroll down in the left pane. ■ ■ ■ Next. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and then click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select Lounge/Recreation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. floors. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and other room-bounding components. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. heating air temperature. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. For Cooling Information. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.00 °F : N/A is specified. This indicates the cooling set point. and dehumidification set point. Next.00 °F : 54. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. the zone information displays for the selected zone. and air changes per hour. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that 74. This indicates the outdoor air per person. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. roofs. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : 90. click (Shading).Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.00 °F : N/A is specified. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that 70. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that <Building> is selected. outdoor air per area. For Heating Information. This indicates the heating set point. and humidification set point. cooling air temperature. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.

20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Because this is an unoccupied space. Click OK. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Under Energy Analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). for Number. open MEP . it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 212P. Under Energy Analysis. select Plenum. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. click Cancel. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. enter 0. select Plenum. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. For Name. select Level 3.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.

4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. for City. On the Place tab. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. is selected. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and zone information. double-click Level 2 . In this exercise.Space Plan. under Energy Analysis.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. click in the Value field. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . NH. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and verify that the space has replaced the void. and select space Plenum 212P. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. space. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. for Energy Data. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. click Edit. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. you verified building. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. enter 03101. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.rvt. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . select School or University. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Manchester. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Postal Code. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. For Location. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.

■ On the Weather tab. you need to select this option. and click OK. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. both. verify that Level 1 is selected. For Condition Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. ft. and click OK. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click in the Value column. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. and click Element Properties. For Building Construction. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For People.Audio Visual. select Specified. For Space Type. enter 200 Btu/h. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that New Construction is selected. Select Area per person. right-click. select Library . enter 150 Btu/h. If. For Project Phase. Click OK twice. select space Library 219. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. and enter 50 sq. a cooling load. select Specified. or neither. For Sliver Space Tolerance. and then click . For Sensible. this option adjusts the times automatically. select Heated and cooled. verify that Occupiable is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). under Volume Computations. and click OK. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. for Values. For Ground Plane. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. For Export Complexity. verify that <Building> is specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that 1' 0" is specified.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Latent. In order to select a space. for Building Service. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. click Edit. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 In the drawing area. for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified.

it should be corrected before you calculate loads. NH. and can be modified here. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Next. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. You should correct the space error in the building model. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and under Heating Information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Select the space associated with the warning. verify that Manchester. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Building Construction. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 12 Click the Details tab. select Actual. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. and click OK. verify that School or University is selected. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. You have verified the building information. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). for Values. Click OK twice. For Building Service. is specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Under Power. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Actual. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. There should be no warnings displayed. select 219 Library. for Values. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. click Information). For Electrical Loads.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . click Calculate. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . click Edit. For Location. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that <Building> is specified.

NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . or make any changes to the model. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 .rvt. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and zone information for the building model. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. click Training Files. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Click OK. space. For Color Scheme. weather. space.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.Space Plan. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. select HVAC Zones. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 219 Library. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. or zone information. and a loads report displays. 21 Click OK. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 After you review the loads report. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the drawing area. 17 In the loads report. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 19 In the drawing area. 15 Review the loads report for project. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. In this exercise.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Energy Analysis. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.

You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.5 Zoom in to the legend. in 1-ton increments. and click OK. select Tonnage Range. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select the color scheme legend.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 11 Using the method learned previously.

select New Construction. In the next exercise. For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Select Schedule building components. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. select Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Space Airflow Schedule. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. select Spaces. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In this exercise. Click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Phase. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. more category options are available.12 Close the file with or without saving it. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.rvt.Space Fill is the active view. for Select available fields from. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 .

In the Calculated Value dialog. In the Schedule Properties dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. Click OK. For Discipline. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select HVAC. enter Airflow Delta. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Not Between. click (Browse). select Level. and Blank line. For Type. and click OK. Header. enter . and then click . Select Formula.■ Under Available fields. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Then by. For Fields. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ Click Calculated Value. Select Ascending. and then select Hidden field. for Formula. select Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Fields dialog. For Formula. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level. select Airflow Delta. select Number. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Air Flow. and then click Conditional Format. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test.

select red. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. ■ The schedule displays. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and click OK.■ ■ ■ For Value. Under Conditions to Use. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the next lesson. In later exercises. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . In this exercise. click the color swatch. In the Color dialog. a view opens that contains the selected space. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. right-click to access schedule properties. For Background Color. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. verify that Show is highlighted. Click OK twice. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet.

78 .

you will create supply air systems. you modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. and work with the airflow schedule. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 79 . Then. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. After completing the air systems lesson. In this lesson. As you place the air terminals.

and scroll to space 223. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 3 In the ceiling view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the space crossing lines display. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.

13 On the Options Bar. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 17 Move the cursor down. type 12. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and select Supply Diffuser . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 425 CFM. as shown. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and then select both Copy and Multiple.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and press Enter. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. verify that Constrain is cleared. If the host element is modified or moved. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Also. for Flow.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down.Rectangular Face Round Neck . which in this case is the ceiling grid. the hosted elements are updated as well. select the diffuser. and then press Esc to end the command. and press Enter. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 9 On the Placement panel. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.

21 On the Options Bar. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. and click Open. 22 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 24 In the Open dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 29 Place 2 diffusers. 25 In the drawing area.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Next. As you place the return diffusers. and then press Esc. select one of the diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. click Place on Face. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . clear Leader.rfa. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. click Yes. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.

33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. click Yes. and click OK. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select one of the return diffusers. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the Project Browser. and click to select the lines. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select Strong Reference. for Reference. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Level. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. under Other.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. enter 9' 0"2750. click the Level 1 line. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. and click OK. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. for Constraints ➤ Offset. ■ ■ For the end point.

When you highlight a space. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted. including energy analysis.Press Esc. In this exercise. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. click Training Files. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and click View ➤ Systems. You then create the logical connection between the system components. However. right-click the title. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. After creating the logical connection. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan . they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. the space crossing lines display. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.

select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. the number of elements is updated. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. On the Options Bar. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and Flow value. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 15 Click Cancel. System Name. review the Number of Elements. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 12 In the System Browser. Connect Into. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. As you add diffusers to systems. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 6 Keep the System Browser open.

24 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In this exercise. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 18 Click OK. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. the air terminals are the children.17 Using the method learned previously. 22 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. 25 Click OK. Rename the system Next. under Identity Data. for Mark. and the system connects them. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. which updates the name in the System Browser. for System Name. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.

2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. select Network. indicating that it’s the active view. select the upper left diffuser. for Solution Type. When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Plan.rvt. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and display solution 1. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. which provides various layout tools. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. Also.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. A Generate Layout tab displays. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 4 In the drawing area. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Network type provides several solutions. In this case. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. the space crossing lines display.

you’ll get an error in a later step. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Flex Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. enter 3'. For Offset. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For Offset. For Duct Type.Round. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Modify. as shown. For Duct Type. click Settings. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . enter 9' 10 1/2".7 On the Options Bar. Select Branch. Click OK. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.

or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.11 Click Finish Layout. For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .

fittings. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. and then click OK. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Graphics. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. but not all values are used in this view. highlight a segment of the main duct. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. thus it is not part of the system. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. for Values Displayed. Usually. a disconnection exists. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. If the entire network does not highlight. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and equipment.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. for Color Scheme. and click OK. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.Flow. Using a flow-based color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Duct Color Fill . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. The first time you press Tab. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. select By View. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and click to select it. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.

Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. for Flow.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. under Mechanical . select the color scheme legend. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. select the WSHP. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 20 In the drawing area. and press Enter.Airflow. and click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select Duct Color Fill . and on the Options Bar. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.Velocity. for Schemes. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. select one of the diffusers in the system. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK.

Select Only. Under Constraints.08 in-wg/100ft. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and select 16". and then click to select it. select Friction. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. highlight a segment of the duct. Select Restrict Height. for Branch Sizing. and drag it to the right. Click OK. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Cancel. and enter . Select the upper segment of main duct. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). The ductwork and fittings are updated.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Calculated Size Only.

and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Using this tool. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. static pressure. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. so that you can modify the system design accordingly.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss.

34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. also known as the critical path. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. click Training Files. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 35 Click Finish. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Design is highlighted. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . and click to specify the end of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and select the WSHP.

10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. and click Draw Duct. select the top right diffuser. for Offset. double-click MEP . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 11 On the Options Bar. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click the corner where the Top. 14 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .8 Press Esc twice to end the command. right-click the connector grip. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.3D MEP. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select 9' 10 1/2". Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 15 On the ViewCube. Front. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. NOTE When drawing duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 22 Using the same method. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. in space 115. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 19 In the drawing area. Also. it is considered a closed loop. The ductwork is automatically created. the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

25 Press Esc. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning.

and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 .To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 30 Press Esc twice.

Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Flow. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Using the same method. and click OK. and then click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. such as a plenum.Airflow. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Constraints. under Mechanical . select a segment of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height.

you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Then. Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. including 2 base mounted pumps. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. 109 . You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.2-6 Tons .HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. in corridor 328. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Horizontal . and select WSHP . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. as shown. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . verify that Wall faces is selected.Left Return .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.

and enter 2'. 10 Select the WSHP.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and click to place the dimension. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. as shown. and in the Type Selector. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. click the dimension. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

and click to place it in the mechanical room. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.14 Click Modify. enter 12 GPM. select the 2 WSHPs. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 9'. as shown. for Offset. Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Mechanical. for Water Flow. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .

22 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.21 Click Modify. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.

Design is highlighted. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Unlike logical connections (systems). right-click the Systems column heading. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan . and click View ➤ Piping. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . but without a corresponding system.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . analyses cannot be performed.rvt. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. where it is easier to review the information. You can create pipes to connect system components. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Mech 330). This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.

As you assign equipment to systems. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 10 On the Options Bar. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. and the Edit System tool is not active. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. for System Name. select the 2 WSHPs. while pressing Ctrl. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. This display indicates that the system is selected. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Assigning a system component to an existing system. 12 In the drawing area. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Therefore. select the boiler. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar.In the System Browser. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 19 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ HVAC .Design. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. for System Name. and select the cooling tower. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. double-click Roof .13 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 25 Select the boiler. expand the Hydronic Return system category. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and click OK. indicating the logical connection. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 29 Right-click CHWS. In heating mode. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and click Expand All. and bypasses the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. and click Select.22 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. In cooling mode. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 26 Click Finish Editing System.

and click Column Settings. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You also manually modify the layout path as required. expand Piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Properties. including the flow rate and size of the component. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. for Water Flow. and click OK. 31 In the Column Settings dialog.In the System Browser. 32 In the System Browser. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. enter 18 GPM. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature.

and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.Design is highlighted. then the Select a System dialog displays. press Tab to highlight the system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. When you draw a box to select components. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.HVAC plan view range are highlighted.Mech 330). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.rvt. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. select CHWR. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. click Check None. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. the boiler. 9 In the Select a System dialog.HVAC Plan . A system preview displays in red. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and click to select it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. indicating that it’s the active view. you can place the cursor over a system component. click Training Files. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. select Mechanical Equipment. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. 10 Click OK.

duct. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. For Inset. click Settings. 13 Click Cancel. structural beams.11 On the Options Bar. or architectural components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. It does not reference the architecture. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that Solutions is selected. enter 1' 6''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 14 On the Generate Layout tab.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and the flow for the other is 12. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.16 Click Finish Layout. With each Tab. and press Tab 3 times. 17 Optionally. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. the flow for one WSHP is 18. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 19 In the drawing area. to display the path with thinner lines.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 22 Select the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. and access its instance properties.

124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System.Design. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. which propagates flow throughout the system. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 27 On the System Tools panel. double-click Level 1 . the Number of Elements is now 8. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Next. you physically close the CHWR loop. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.HVAC Plan . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 28 In the Project Browser. Logically. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.

34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and click Cancel. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. select a WSHP. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). under Mechanical. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. as shown. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. access its instance properties. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 38 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 35 Using the drag control.

enter 1' 6''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. Click Settings. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 41 Click OK. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 0''/12''. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset. and then click OK.40 In the Select a System dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Slope. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select CHWS.

47 In the drawing area. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 48 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. as shown. In a later exercise. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.

128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select a different layout solution. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Add piping to close the supply loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. To create the piping system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or manually modify the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.50 Using the same method. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 51 Click Finish Layout.

NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. As you work in the training file. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . double-click 3D HVAC Building.

select the section of piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown.

■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point.

and click OK. select the return pipe riser. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the lower one is secondary. 12 In the 3D view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and click Draw Pipe. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 13 In the plan view. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

7''. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.In a plan view. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and you select 1 connector. and press Enter. enter 2'. ■ Move the cursor down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 1' . for Offset. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.

20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. as shown. 18 Press Esc twice. and select it. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and the appropriate fittings are created. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and click OK. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. As you place piping runs that are close together. 19 In the plan view. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the bottom connector. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 29 If necessary. you select the tee fitting. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol.

32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector. and click Draw Pipe.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 4'. 33 Press Esc.

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

and press Enter. enter 9' 6''. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. right-click the bottom control on the tee. type 1'. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. You now have a closed loop system. right-click. and click Element Properties. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

44 In the 3D view. and click Element Properties. 42 Click OK. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). Connect the cooling tower Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that Flow is 125 GPM.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 40 Click Cancel. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click OK. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. the value is 0 GPM. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). as shown. 48 In the plan view. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . under Mechanical. 43 Press Esc. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. under Mechanical. right-click. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. 41 Using the same method.50 or 50% of the Flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. notice that under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. When you create the pumps in parallel.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.rvt. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. click Training Files. the water bypasses the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. When the valve is open. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. and is heated by the boiler. and close the dialog.

HVAC Plan . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. as shown. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted. The bypass valve is closed by default. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Adding Valves | 143 . 8 Press Esc twice.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another Ball Valve . 12 Select Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc.

and select Ball Valve . Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 19 Using the same method. and click OK. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. under Mechanical. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Adding Valves | 145 . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. right-click.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Ball Valve . verify that Flow is 0 GPM. 20 Select the bypass valve. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. In heating mode.

Design is highlighted.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.HVAC Plan . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. as shown. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.22 Using the method you just learned. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Initially. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

click Pipe Color Fill .Flow. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 147 . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. for Schemes.Size. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click OK.

for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment).25 FT/100ft. Select And. Under Constraints. and for Velocity. 13 Press Esc. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. select Friction. and enter 2. enter 5 FPS. and click to select the branch. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Click OK. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

or manually modify the pipe. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System In this exercise. or offset elevations are incorrect. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. pressure. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Using the System Inspector. and double-click 3D HVAC Building.rvt. select a different layout solution. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspecting the System | 149 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.

This information helps you modify the system design. flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). as required. An inspection flag reports the section number.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

89 psi.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 9 Using the same method. select 90° F. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. as shown. and to size pipe. the Static Pressure is 7. 10 Click Finish.88 psi. inspect Section 6 again. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.67 psi. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them. and click OK. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. In this exercise. targeting those systems that need attention. and the Pressure Loss is 1. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 4 In the System Browser. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and double-click Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. right-click the Systems titlebar. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. For example.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and for pipe sizing. 7 In the System Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Warnings display. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. As you learned when placing components. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. thus assigning the components to a system. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and click View.rvt. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).HVAC Plan . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the System Browser. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. the pipe is associated with that system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. After you assign components to a system. After you have assigned all components to systems.Design. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design. click Training Files. and click Show to view all of the system components. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.

you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 10 Using the same methods. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . click Close. and click Expand All. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. expand the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . 12 In the System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 13 Right-click CHWR. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and confirm unassigned system components. and select Level 3 . right-click Hydronic Return. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. otherwise. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.TIP If you have multiple views open.Design floor plan. 14 Using the methods that you learned.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting.

and demand factors that are applied in the design. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Copper. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.Wire Sizes. ■ Click New Correction Factor. For Material. expand Wiring . select Wiring Types. As you place components and create circuits. enter THHN. select 90. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Temperature Rating. click (Open). enter 1. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature. select 75. wiring. click Training Files. ■ ■ For Factor. You also add a wiring type. Select Correction Factor. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.rvt. speeding up the design phase.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. distribution systems. Click OK.04. ■ ■ For Material. select Copper. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

enter -5 fc and 5 fc.■ ■ For Value. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. for Custom Colors. Click Background Color. Click OK three times. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

Create a panel schedule. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create power loads. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. as you place lighting fixtures. Then. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. First. power circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. 167 .

■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. click Training Files. Under Scheme Definition. select Average Estimated Illumination. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Orange.00 fc. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . By using orange as the color for this range. select the color for Less Than 20. for Basic Colors. You can create additional color schemes. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.00 fc. select the color legend. In the Color dialog. click (Open). for the Spaces Category.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.

Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.277. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .7 In the Project Browser.5 fc range is satisfied. zoom to space Library 219. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Lighting Ceiling plan.5 fc range. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 13 Click the Level 2 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The red field will clear once the +/. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.

select Multiple. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 23 Click OK. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 19 Press ESC to end the command.

31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None.277V. Click OK.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

select Multiple Alignment. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 On the Options Bar.277V. The lighting delta is satisfied. click the ceiling grid line as shown.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open).rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the light fixture IES files. In the next exercise. click Training Files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.

Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Color Fill plan. 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .

Under Identity Data. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Under Electrical. select T5 [HO]. for Type Mark. click the value for Light Loss Factor. enter 162. click the value for Initial Intensity. Under Photometrics. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Click OK. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.85.00 VA. ■ Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Color Preset. select Luminous Flux. select Xenon and click OK. enter . for Ballast Loss Factor. for Lamp. Under Photometrics. ■ Click Apply. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ Click OK twice. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select 463T5_S. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . enter F15. In the Select File dialog. and click OK. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.ies and click Open. In the Name dialog. click the value for Initial Color. specify 15000.277V and click OK. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Apparent Load. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .00 lm. enter .93. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .277V. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 10 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. Click OK. click Check None.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. select Lighting Fixtures.

16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. In the next exercise. Placing Switches. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). junction boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. you add switches. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and receptacles to your design. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Junction Boxes.rvt. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.Press Delete. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Receptacles | 183 .

7 Click to place the switch. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. and Receptacles | 185 .rfa and click Open.NoLoad. Select Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes.

enter 9’0”. NOTE When entering values.Offset. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the junction box. Under Electrical. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. zoom to space Library 219. 21 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.14 Press ESC to end the command. for Level 2 . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. for Mark. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog. note the Number of Poles is 1. Click OK twice. enter JB-1NL. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

NOTE If necessary. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Number. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Expand General. and Voltage. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Receptacles | 187 . Placing Switches.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load. 26 In the System Browser. Select Size. right-click and click Column Settings. 23 In the System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Name. Distribution System. Click OK. and Number of Elements. Junction Boxes. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Expand Electrical. 24 For any column. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel.

33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar.

move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open).equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. for Max. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter 20. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select 480/277 Wye. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Distribution System. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .Surface: 100A. select 120/208 Wye. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 7 Press ESC to end the command.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar.Loads. For Panel Name. 15 On the Options Bar. enter PP-2B. Click OK.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers.

20 In the drawing area. 23 In the Filter dialog. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. enter LP-2B. zoom to space Instruction 221. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter 20. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Loads. Click OK. Click OK. For Panel Name.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. and for Category. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 38 Press ESC to end the command. except without wire.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click (Open). Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Check None. enter 2. Click OK. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Hot Conductors. select Wires. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.Loads. 41 In the Filter dialog.

17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. click Training Files. and then expand circuit 1. Distribution System. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Rating. right-click on the Systems heading. Click OK. Voltage. 13 In the System Browser.rvt. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . expand Power. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Expand Electrical. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. and verify that Load. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 2 In the drawing area. ■ 16 In the System Browser.

Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. under Electrical. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Click OK. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. change the Voltage to 277V. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. click Edit Type. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. enter FR4. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click below the first one to place it. 35 Press ESC to end the command. for Type Mark. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 40 Click OK twice. Click Tags. Click Yes. under Identity Data. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 47 In the drawing area. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222.

select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . and click Apply. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rfa. and for Category. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK. Click OK. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click OK. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Break.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter a comma. Next you create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click Save. for File Name. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. click Check None. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 52 In the Save As dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. For Circuit Number. 56 In the Filter dialog.

4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. click (Open). 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.rvt. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. enter a. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. under Electrical Lighting. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Switch ID. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.

18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID.Lighting. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. enter b. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.

click Training Files. click (Open). and for Category. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 7 In space Electrical 220. lighting. click Check None. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Circuits are used for power. select Electrical Fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and data systems. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Next you create a circuit and size wire. select the PP-2B panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 2 In the drawing area. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.rvt. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups).26 Close the file with or without saving it. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.Loads. 13 Select the wire again. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. and in the drawing area. enter 2. Click OK. and in the right pane. under Electrical . 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties.rfa. select Wiring.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select the PP-2B panel. as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and click to select the circuit. Creating Power Loads | 209 . Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.

29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. click the connector of the first receptacle. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Electrical space. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. click Training Files. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. select panel LP-2B. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. zoom to space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . click Open.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Next you balance the loads for your design.

14 Close the warning dialog. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Phase B 3636 VA. enter 30A. Scroll down. Click OK. Notice that the loads on Phase A. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#12. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. for Rating. 1-#10. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#12. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3712 VA. B. Under Electrical-Loads. 6 Click OK. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 1-#10.3616 VA). 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. and Phase C . click Rebalance Loads.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.

23 With panel PP-2B still selected. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. under Electrical . 24 Select the transformer TP-2B.15 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. enter 30A. and click OK. Select PP-2B.Loads. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Close the warning dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window.Loads. Click OK. for Rating. click (Open). Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you create a panel schedule. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.rvt. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. enter 25A. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Training Files. under Electrical . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise.

expand Sheets (all). under Other. select Berlin Sans FB. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1/8. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click (Open). enter 3/32. and open E601 . for Font Size.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. select Bold and Italic. Under Header Text. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Font. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 11 Click OK twice. Under Body Text. 7 Select the schedule. click Edit. Under Header Text. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Appearance. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Font Size. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 In the Project Browser. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Close the report. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.Panel Schedules. click Training Files.rvt. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

In the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. Expand Unassigned. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. select space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. each with a load of 180VA. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated.

20 On the Options Bar. for Panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Electrical 214. select MDP-1. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. under Warnings. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 15 In the dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the drawing area.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

type PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. click Training Files.rvt. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and click OK.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . planning is critical to a successful design. you create a PVC pipe type. In this exercise. and click Properties. in addition to loading existing families.Sanitary. In this lesson.Vent. 4 In the Name dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Adding a pipe size. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Duplicate. right-click PVC . 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. 219 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.

click Modify. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Cross.DWV: Standard. for Nominal. Tap. click Training Files. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. enter 1/2''. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Tee Reducing Double Vent .PVC .Vent is listed. 21 In the right pane. for Material. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Tee. 25 For Outside. 22 Click New Size.PVC .0''. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.PVC . select Sanitary. under Pipe Types. select Branch. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .Sch 40 .rfa. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 10 On the Selection panel. 27 For the new pipe size. Tee. enter 10°.DWV: Standard. 24 For Inside Diameter. enter -4' . In the Project Browser. PVC . 26 Click OK. For Offset. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Tee Vent . under Mechanical. and click OK. select None. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. enter 27/32''. 13 In the right panel.Sch 40 . select Plastic. 17 In the left pane. click Pipe Settings. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. and click Main. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 5/8''. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 15 For System Type. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 6 Click OK. 18 For System Type. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Sch 40 .DWV. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.5 In the Type Properties dialog.

including plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. Create the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. add a hot water heater.

2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. you add 2 toilets. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .rvt. NOTE To identify a space name and number. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 urinal. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. as shown.Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. including the men’s room (space Male 107). 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Plumbing Plan .

Wall Mounted. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select Public .1. 4 On the Element panel. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 5 On the Placement panel. under Water Closet . and 3 sinks.Flush Valve . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.6 gpf. as shown. 1 wall-mounted urinal.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. in the Type Selector. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. against the left wall.

under Urinal . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. above the first in the standard toilet space. and press Esc. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again. use the reference line to center the fixture.Wall Hung.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . zoom in closer.

select 5''x5'' Strainer . 12 On the Placement panel. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. under Floor Drain . In placing the fixture. click Place on Face.Rectangular. 14 Click Modify.2'' Drain.

You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and click View ➤ Piping. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In this exercise. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. a urinal. and review the components listed under this system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a floor drain. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. click Training Files.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. clear Lines (<Overhead>). verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 8 In the Filter dialog.Plumbing Plan . Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.

The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. so the Create Sanitary System is available. If you deselected the drain. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Finish Editing System. expand Sanitary. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. for System Name. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. enter Sanitary 107. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit System panel. 13 In the Systems Browser.

18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. and click OK. as shown. for example. a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow.

and click Settings. and modify it to meet project requirements. 23 For Offset. 21 On Options Bar. for Diameter. for Slope. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The default settings are automatically modified. 27 Click Modify. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 26 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -4'-0”. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 25 On the Options Bar. select Intersections. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click Solutions. select Main. 24 In the left pane. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Solution Type. select 4''. and click OK. enter -1' 0''. You accept this suggested solution. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -1' 0''. and for Offset. for Offset. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select Branch. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .19 On the Options Bar.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.

click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control. as shown.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . adding sinks in the men’s room. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.

Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 . under Lavatory .Rectangular. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. in the Type Selector.Public. 4 On the Element panel. select 22''x22'' . as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel. click Training Files.

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 8 Select the sink.7 Click Modify. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 2' 4''. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. TIP When entering dimensions. without having to enter ' and '' symbols.

expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 16 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 11 In the System Browser. click Add To System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Press Esc. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

19 In the 3D view. double-click 3D Plumbing.In the System Browser. as shown. with the tee fitting selected.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 22 In the plan view. 20 Select the fitting. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 21 Select the tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Draw Pipe.

NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Slope. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 27 Click Modify. In this example. enter 1/8'' / 12''. and click Apply. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar.6''. for Offset. enter 2' . 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click to draw the pipe.

3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC .DWV. 31 Click Modify. 30 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . click to place the fitting. select Standard. 29 In the Type Selector. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe. and when the vertical center line displays. 32 Select the double wye fitting.Sch 40 . under Wye 45 Deg Double .

38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. In the next steps. for Offset. you add pipe segments to the double wye. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 1'. 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Press Esc. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. enter 6''. right-click the right connector. and click Draw Pipe.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. as shown. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).

enter 6''. and click Draw Pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. right-click the bottom connector. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. 46 In the section view. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc. 49 Using the same method.

54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. select the P-Trap on the left. 52 In the plan view. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .DWV.PVC . under Trap P . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 53 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 55 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 56 Using the same method. select Standard. 51 In the Type Selector. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.

Move the cursor to the left. In the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. and click Draw Pipe. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click in the plan view. 58 Using the same method.. and press Enter. Click Modify. select the left P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.

■ In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Press Esc. and select a proposed solution. In the Type Selector. click Finish to select the recommended solution. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. while pressing Ctrl.

Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. and verify the slope. click Finish. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Training Files. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. for Slope. 62 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.

and click the intersection to place the fitting.Design.DWV. 7 On the Selection panel.Design. select the elbow fitting on the right. and click Draw Pipe. 10 In the 3D view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the Type Selector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. right-click the top connector.Floor level line.PVC . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. as shown. select the vertical stack. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Sch 40 . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3 In the Section view. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 5 Select the tee. and click to draw the pipe. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select Standard. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . click Modify. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Overall.

14 On the Options Bar.Sch 40 . under Plug . 12 Select the fitting. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .DWV. 15 Press Esc.11 Click Modify.PVC . 18 In the plan view. for Offset. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector. 13 Click the rotate control once. as shown. enter 1'-0”. select Standard.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan .Design is open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.19 Click Modify. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 6 In the left pane. 14 In the System Browser. select Plumbing Fixtures. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Main. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. if necessary. for System Type.Overall.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . under Design ➤ Plumbing . minimize the Sanitary system. 4 In the right pane.) 10 Click OK. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Branch. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 9 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water. and for System Type.Design ➤ 3D Views. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. For Offset. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click Main. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. double-click 3D Plumbing . and sinks. click Check None. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. enter 9' 3''. draw a selection box to select the toilets. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. urinal. for System Type. 15 In the plan view. expand Unassigned. For Offset. 7 In the left pane. select Domestic Cold Water. and click OK. select Branch. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Pipe Types: Water.

verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. In the System Browser. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 19 On the System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 21 On the Edit System panel. click Edit System. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .

enter 0”/12”. enter 7''. enter 3' . 37 On the Options Bar. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. select Water. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. For Slope. and press Enter. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 28 In the Type Selector. as shown. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 36 Move the cursor to the left. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. as shown. for Offset. 33 Click Modify. select 3/4''. For Offset. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 10'. 34 In the plan view. enter 4'0”. and click to place the pipe. click to the left of the urinal. connect the second toilet. 30 In the plan view. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. and press Enter.2 7/8''. and click the connector. right-click the top DCW connector.25 Using the same method. select the sink above the urinal. under Pipe Types.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 41 Select the top sink. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click OK. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click to connect to the main cold water line. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.39 Move the cursor to the left. 40 Click Modify.

45 Close the file with or without saving it. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. add a water heater. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Using the same method. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . while pressing Ctrl.Overall. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.rvt. click Training Files. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. select the 3 sinks. and verify that Level 1 . 2 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.

enter Domestic Hot Water 107. When designing systems. in the Unassigned folder. 12 In the Type Selector. for System Name. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. select 0. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). as shown. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the System Browser.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. and click OK. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.Tankless. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. Default Domestic Hot Water.6 Gallon. 14 Click Modify. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. verify that DCW 107 is selected. you edit the system to add equipment. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 13 In the plan view. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. and click Edit System. under Water Heater . Default Domestic Cold Water. In later steps. 15 In the System Browser.

26 Move the cursor to the right. select the water heater. and select Draw Pipe. 19 Select the water heater. 21 On the Placement Tools panel.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. as shown. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 1' 6''. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 24 Move the cursor up. 27 Click Modify. click Finish Editing System. right-click the middle left connector. and on the Edit System panel. 23 On the Options Bar. Slope: 0''/12''. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . Offset: 4' 6''. 22 In the Type Selector. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. for Offset. 25 On the Options Bar. and click the water main line. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. enter 10’. and press Enter.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and for Offset. click Finish Editing System. and in the System Selector. for Diameter. select a sink. 33 On the Edit System panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). enter 1' 6''. 36 Move the cursor down. enter 9' 0''. for Offset. enter 1''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 37 On the Options Bar. 30 On the System Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. click Edit System. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. as shown. select 4'-6''. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . as shown. enter 2' 8''. 41 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 1’.39 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. and click just above the bottom sink.

262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.rvt. 2 Right-click Standard. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In this tutorial.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. go to http://www. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Duplicate. 267 . In this lesson. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.

3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 9 Click OK. click Rename. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Carbon Steel. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. In this exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Main. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. and enter Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. 6 In the Project Browser. For System Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. and then click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you modify the type properties of the pipe. for Material. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is selected. and click Properties. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. For System Type. For Offset. Next. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. under Mechanical. For Pipe Type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 10 Close the file with or without saving it. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. duct. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. or architectural components. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. In the next exercise. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that 9' 0" is specified. In the left pane. However.

and click Element Properties. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Training Files. select Spaces. 8 Using a crossing window.rvt. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Name. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1. click Add. 6 In the drawing area. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click OK.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Under Categories. select the upper half of the building. select Fire Protection. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. under Fire Protection. the space crossing lines display. right-click. For Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Sprinkler Zone.

filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. for Sprinkler Zone. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Fire Protection. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Zone 1. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and then access instance properties. enter Zone 2. verify that only Spaces are selected. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. including a calculated value parameter. click Training Files. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. to which you add various parameters. 13 Using the same method.rvt. you create schedules for sprinkler design.

double-click on each column separator. 14 Select the new header. For Group parameter under. Click OK. and on the ribbon. select Fire Protection. For Type of Parameter. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Obstructed-Combustible.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select To the nearest 1'. enter 15. enter Light. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Maximum Spacing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. for Name. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Rounding. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Maximum Spacing. For Key name.Design is highlighted. select Spaces. 9 On the Formatting tab. The schedule displays. 11 Click OK twice. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 6 Using the same method. indicating that it’s the active view. select Feet and fractional inches. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. click Add Parameter. click the Formatting tab. Click OK. Select Schedule keys. 10 In the Format dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 7 Click OK. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan . For Name. For Units. and click Field Format. select Length. In the Maximum Spacing column. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.

Unobstructed Ordinary. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. enter Sprinkler Schedule. select Spaces. Unobstructed Extra. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. and press Enter. Click OK. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. under Available fields. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. For Name. enter 130.

select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Formula. For Then by. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. under Other. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Fixed. select Number. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Rounding. select Sprinkler Zone. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Area. In the Fields dialog. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. and click Field Format. for Sorting/Grouping. select Common. and click OK. For Type. 19 Click the Formatting tab. click . select 0 decimal place. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Click OK. Enter the formula operator / after Area. Select Header and Blank line. For Discipline. click Edit. For Units. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 22 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. for Sort by.

At the bottom of the dialog. For Then by (second instance). right-click the schedule. and then click Field Format. and click View Properties. For Fields. and select Totals only. click Edit. select Hidden field. select Level. select Level equals Level 2. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Filter by.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Grand totals. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinkler Zone. 27 In the drawing area. select Number. and then select Hidden field. Under Field formatting. ■ In the Format dialog. 30 Click OK twice. for Filter. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. click Edit. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Embedded Schedule. select Calculate totals. select Sprinklers. for Fields. under Other. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. delete the word Maximum. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and select Totals only. double-click Type. System Name. Under Field formatting. select Grand totals. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click View Properties. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Available fields. for Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and Count. For Category. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. On the Formatting tab.

This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 44 In the schedule.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select Light. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Ordinary. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select space 221 Instruction. 43 Click Cancel. and click OK. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan Design. 50 Access the instance properties. under Identity Data. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. but their values are not determined. As a result. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 46 With the space still selected. 52 Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 48 In the floor plan. double-click FP . and the spacing parameter values are evident. 41 In the plan view. and access the instance properties. select Ordinary. Unobstructed.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

After finishing each exercise. By following the recommended workflow. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 279 . you can choose to save your work.autodesk. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you create the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. If the tutorial training files are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and double-click Level 2 . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you place the sprinklers. methodology. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. click Training Files.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. At the end of this tutorial. However. you will understand the process.

When this happens. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When there is a small misalignment. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.

8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.Pendent .7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and select Sprinkler . 11 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. 10 Press Esc twice. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.

282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. Also. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Next. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. you place non-hosted sprinklers. enter 14' 6". 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and click Element Properties.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 200B. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.FP_Ceiling view.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 10' 6". under Constraints. open Design ➤ FP . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 18 Type WT. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. specify a vertical offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 17 In the Project Browser. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . move the cursor to the right. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 29 Press Esc. for Offset.Design. 19 In the floor plan. and press Enter. 25 Click OK. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This number is determined in the schedule. enter 11. Notice that the schedule updates. and 200C). 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Next. you adjust the offset. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Number.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Fire Protection Plan . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. and with piping (physical connection). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.30 Close the file with or without saving it. However. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In the next exercise. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After creating the logical connection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. click Training Files.

click View ➤ Systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. named Fire Protection Wet. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. within the Piping Systems folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. As you assign sprinklers to systems. as shown. Creating a Piping System | 285 . The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. In the System Browser. and select Piping. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 5 Right-click the header.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 19 Click OK. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and on the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . For Offset. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser.Wet is selected. press Tab. Next. verify that 9' 0" is specified. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and click Select. select an initial piping layout. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. In the left pane. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. select Branch. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. providing system editing tools. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. For Pipe Type. and a piping layout preview displays. 11 With the system still selected. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and number of elements in the system. for System Name. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. enter FP Wet_Zone2.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. verify that Main is selected. click Settings. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. indicating the logical connection. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. system equipment. place the cursor over a sprinkler. The Generate Layout tools are activated. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select the system.

In general. and select solution 5. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. and green represents branch lines).20 On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. click Place Base. select 2". enter -12' 0". as shown. When the layout is finished. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 23 For Offset. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . verify that Network is selected. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Solutions. 22 On the Options Bar. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system.

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. On the Generate Layout panel. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. as shown. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 29 Click Finish Layout. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. A (parallel movement control) displays. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Modify.

or manually modify the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . select a different layout solution. Next. Either relocate the system components. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary. and various manual pipe creation tools.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and then you create piping to physically connect them. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the Connect Into tool. or that offset elevations are incorrect.

2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.rvt. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click Training Files.

14 Close the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. for Solution Type. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and pipe or duct is created. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select solution 5. you can select the pipe or duct. click Finish Editing System. or a system component to display system tools. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 8 In the corridor. verify that Network is selected. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. radiators. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. click Add To System. mechanical equipment. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. air terminals. 9 On the Edit System panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. verify that Solutions is selected. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 5 In the drawing area. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar.

pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and then tile the views. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Offset. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and then press Esc. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. select 9'. 21 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. right-click. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and click Draw Pipe. 29 Using the same method.

31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . Because the whole system highlights.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . double-click on the section head to open the section view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. ■ 6 Press Esc. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Design is highlighted.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Scale.Fire Protection Plan . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select 1/4" = 1'-0".

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and then tag the piping as shown. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 26 Using the same method. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 25 On the Options Bar.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. as shown. select 1 1/4". The pipe diameter is modified. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). for Diameter. 23 Close the 3D view.

In this exercise. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . For additional practice. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you created a wet fire protection system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You added tags to pipes.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

right-click Copy of Level 1. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and apply a view template. dependent views. right-click Level 1. 2 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and view references.rvt. matchlines. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Floor Plans. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. If the view included detail graphics. 307 . you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.

create dependent views for areas B and C. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. as shown. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 9 Click OK. more focused. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 4 Using the same method. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Rename.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 In the drawing area. views and put them on the sheet. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. and then press Esc. click Training Files. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view.rvt. and click Apply Default View Template. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.

Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 21 Using the same method. For Line Weight. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select 11. For Line Pattern. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . and click OK. click the current value. and then press Esc./ ---). 19 In the drawing area. In the Color dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. select Double Dash 5/8". Click OK. 20 Select the upper view reference and. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select black. on the Options Bar. for Target view. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and zoom to each of the view references. 27 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 25 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise.rvt. select Plumbing. click Training Files. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. select Documentation.Domestic Water. Under Graphics. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and click to select it. select Plumbing Isometric.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Apply Default View Template. for View Classification. 2 Zoom in. Click OK.Domestic Water. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. For Default View Template. The section crop lines no longer display. for View Name. right-click Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . enter Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and select the section box. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. For Sub-Discipline. right-click 3D Plumbing.

and click to select it. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.9 Right-click. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and then click OK. select 3. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. For Pattern. 12 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. select Dash.

and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks.

On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click. and click to select it. In the drawing area. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.Domestic Water view with detailing. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. press Tab 3 times. On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.15 Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.

21 Click OK twice.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. click on the Format value. In the Format dialog. When the view is associated with a sheet. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. verify that Common is selected. and click to place the spot slope annotation. as shown. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 25 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. for Rounding. select To the nearest 1/8". For Slope. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .rvt. select 1/4"=1'-0''. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.

select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. double-click M601 . using the same method. 13 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. drag it to the sheet. for Line Weight. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. Creating Callout Views | 317 . under Sheets (all). ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Click OK. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser. Click OK. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and select the viewport. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click the callout view. for View Name. For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Default View Template.

Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. under Names. and click Rename. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK.

321 . symbols. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. linetypes. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. and annotation to create a legend. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. duct tags.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 With the text still selected. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. as shown. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Annotations In this exercise. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.

15 On the Options Bar. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. Creating Annotations | 323 . Add leaders 10 Select the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a segment of round duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. and then click Right Straight. a return diffuser.9 Press Esc twice. and a segment of rectangular duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. verify that Leader is cleared.

move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 20 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Load Family dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. If necessary. and click OK. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. click Load. 24 On the Options Bar.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. clear Leader. 17 Click Modify. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Ducts.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click Open.

32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 26 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and then press Esc. and Attached End. select Horizontal. as shown. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 31 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP.25 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Leader. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 325 . open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.

as shown. for Leader. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.

Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. That’s because you changed a type property. and lock lighting fixtures. select the last tag placed. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. you use temporary dimensions to locate. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. not simply an instance property.36 Press Esc twice. and click OK. for Leader Arrowhead. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and all elements of that type are affected. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Dot Open 1/16". 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

select the dimension line. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. click Training Files. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 12 Press Esc. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. and then select the interior face of the wall. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. On the Options Bar. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control.

Because the dimensions are locked. enter 8'. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and notes. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. annotation symbols. Creating a Legend In this exercise. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.13 Using the same method. and press Enter. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. click the 3 interior locks on the line.3 1/2"). Creating a Legend | 329 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 19 Using the same methods. 16 Press Esc. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and offset them 8' from the wall. linework.

select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select 1/4" = 1' -0". ■ 9 In the drawing area. select Floor Plan. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click below the title to place the diffuser.rvt. click Training Files. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 10 Using the same method. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.8 Neck. 5 Click in the drawing area. For View. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Scale.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . enter Diffuser Legend.

Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 . 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.

23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 21 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc.DROP and its text note. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.MECHANICAL LEGEND.30 Select Spot Elevation . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 333 . and then click Modify. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 34 Using the method learned previously. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc.

A drafting view using detail components. and text. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A detail callout that references another view. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.113 East elevation view. indicating that it’s the active view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. detail groups. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 335 .

and click to place it. and then modify and align the views. Next.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 5 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . clear Leader. place Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards.113 East on the sheet. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 8 Using the same method.

under Identity Data. right-click. and click OK. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. giving the appearance of a single view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Activate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet.9 Press Esc. select the 113 North view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 13 Right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet. and click Deactivate View.

19 Select the Level 1 line. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. you add wiring to the diagram. right-click. right-click. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and click Activate View. select the 113 East elevation view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. as shown.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise. 22 Press Esc. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 21 Using the drag control. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .rvt. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. as shown. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the New Subcategory dialog. enter Electrical Power. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click New. expand Lines. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . select 6. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.113 North view. In the Line Styles dialog. Under Modify Subcategories. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Close the Project Browser. for Line Weight. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. notice that there are no snaps active. and click OK. As you draw. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. for Name. 8 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 9 Beginning at the transformer. verify that Chain is selected.

as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method.

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 28 Click above the cap. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 29 Click Modify.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar.

40 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and then press Esc. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 42 On the Options Bar.36 Press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . for Offset. enter 3/32".5. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 0 0. You enter exact values for each line length.

44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and click OK. 46 In the Project Browser. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. for Name. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. you can ensure that they stay together. 47 In the drawing area. 50 With the group selected. while pressing Ctrl. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. click on the length dimension value. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select all 3 lines. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Using the same method.125. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. Press Esc. and then press Esc. enter 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and press Enter.25. enter Ground.

56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 54 Select the group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. TP-2B.

5 Zoom in to view the section. click Training Files. for Name. and click Rename. In later exercises. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and will place it on sheet E01.rvt. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 2 Right-click the copy. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

7 On the ViewCube. and then press Esc. click Home. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and Left sides converge. Back.6 Select the section box. and then click the corner where the Top.

and click Apply View Template. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D HVAC Iso. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Under Names. Click OK. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Walkthroughs. select 3D Views. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 19 Complete the text labels. Typical. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. as shown. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor down and to the left.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.

and under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 23 Click on the crop region. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. under Extents. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.To rotate and reposition a text label. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and then click OK. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 25 Click OK. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.

Drafting Detail Components | 353 . right-click the view name. For Scale. Place a detail component. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. click Training Files.29 In the drawing area. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. and click Properties. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 3 In the Project Browser. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.rvt. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select 3" = 1'-0". select the isometric view. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.

Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. select Plumbing. for Sub-Discipline. For View Classification. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. as the rectangle start point. select Documentation. 13 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". as shown. 12 On the Element panel. Click OK. 9 Zoom in to the component.

25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 22 Click Modify. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. and then press Esc. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.I. 23 In the drawing area. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. select the filled region. and click OK. (Line). for Type. select C. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .P. 18 With the filled region still selected. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Concrete. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. select Multiple. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.28 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then click to select them. 31 On the Options Bar.

and then select the side of the slab above the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. as shown. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. (Rectangle). 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 45 Using the method learned previously. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc.

for Name. 52 In the Create Group dialog. enter Flashing Membrane_F.. and click OK. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 49 Click Modify. as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group. draw wide detail lines as shown. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.D. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and then click to select them. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. press Tab to highlight the chain. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.

Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 61 Using the same method. as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 64 Press Esc twice.62 Press Esc twice. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 71 Click Modify.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 72 If necessary. and then click OK. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the text insertion point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 80 Press Esc twice. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 81 Select the text note. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 76 To select the leader start point.

82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

88 In the drawing area. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. 90 Press Esc.

you import a CAD detail drawing. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.dwg. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. select Black and White. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Click Open. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. For Colors. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. select Visible. For Layers. For A-----NPP. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. For Import units. select Auto-Detect. for Line Weight. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. click Training Files. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 3. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail.

select the viewport title. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. open P103 .8 Type ZF. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 12 In the drawing area. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 11 Press Esc.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful